SPAR MEASUREMENT THEORY 1
Transcript of SPAR MEASUREMENT THEORY 1
1
SAIL AND SPAR MEASUREMENTTHEORY
2
WELCOMEfrom
Australian Sailing
Your instructor is
Barry Johnson IM
Please introduce yourself by giving us your name background and what you are expecting from this clinic
Sails and Spars Measurement Presentation 180913
Main Objectivesbull Educate Sail and Spar measurers as to their roles according to
the Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS)
Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS) httpwwwsailingorgtoolsdocumentsERS20172020UpdatedPrintVersion-[20912]pdf3
ldquoMeasurementrdquo
bull ldquoMeasurementrdquo of equipment at sailing events to check use of equipment and verify that ldquocertifiedrdquo equipment is still in compliance with the ldquorulesrdquo during a race is called ldquoevent measurementrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectionrdquo
4
ldquoMeasurersrdquo
bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee
5
6
Clinic Outline
Basic Principals
Useful ERS information
Measurement tools
Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
2
WELCOMEfrom
Australian Sailing
Your instructor is
Barry Johnson IM
Please introduce yourself by giving us your name background and what you are expecting from this clinic
Sails and Spars Measurement Presentation 180913
Main Objectivesbull Educate Sail and Spar measurers as to their roles according to
the Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS)
Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS) httpwwwsailingorgtoolsdocumentsERS20172020UpdatedPrintVersion-[20912]pdf3
ldquoMeasurementrdquo
bull ldquoMeasurementrdquo of equipment at sailing events to check use of equipment and verify that ldquocertifiedrdquo equipment is still in compliance with the ldquorulesrdquo during a race is called ldquoevent measurementrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectionrdquo
4
ldquoMeasurersrdquo
bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee
5
6
Clinic Outline
Basic Principals
Useful ERS information
Measurement tools
Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
Main Objectivesbull Educate Sail and Spar measurers as to their roles according to
the Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS)
Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS) httpwwwsailingorgtoolsdocumentsERS20172020UpdatedPrintVersion-[20912]pdf3
ldquoMeasurementrdquo
bull ldquoMeasurementrdquo of equipment at sailing events to check use of equipment and verify that ldquocertifiedrdquo equipment is still in compliance with the ldquorulesrdquo during a race is called ldquoevent measurementrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectionrdquo
4
ldquoMeasurersrdquo
bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee
5
6
Clinic Outline
Basic Principals
Useful ERS information
Measurement tools
Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
ldquoMeasurementrdquo
bull ldquoMeasurementrdquo of equipment at sailing events to check use of equipment and verify that ldquocertifiedrdquo equipment is still in compliance with the ldquorulesrdquo during a race is called ldquoevent measurementrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectionrdquo
4
ldquoMeasurersrdquo
bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee
5
6
Clinic Outline
Basic Principals
Useful ERS information
Measurement tools
Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
ldquoMeasurersrdquo
bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee
5
6
Clinic Outline
Basic Principals
Useful ERS information
Measurement tools
Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
6
Clinic Outline
Basic Principals
Useful ERS information
Measurement tools
Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
7
WHAT IS THE ERS
The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts
bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)
bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations
bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)
bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
8
Terminology
A term used in its defined sense is printed
bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS
Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
APPLICABILITY
The ERS may be made applicable by
(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races
The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing
9
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
10
Changes
The ERS may only be changed as follows
(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction
(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1
Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
11
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Closed Class Rules C22
Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited
bull Open Class Rules C23
Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted
bull Class Rules Authority C24
The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
12
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point
bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
13
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Official Measurer C44
A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification
bull Equipment Inspector C46
A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
14
ERS Section C General Definitions
bull Boat C61
The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race
It includes
bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)
bull Hull appendage(s)
bull Ballast and boat corrector weights
bull Rig
bull Sail(s)
bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables
personal amp portable equipment (C65)
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
15
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights
F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported
F14 Spar Types
(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig
(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
16
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull
BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails
(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging
SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
17
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use
Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
18
ERS Section F Rig Definitions
Rigging Types F17
(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)
(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy
(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
19
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail
(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
20
F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground
F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights
F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
21
F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast
H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
22
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
23
ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions
F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
24
ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions
F3
F31 (a) OUTER POINT
F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK
F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE
F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE
F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION
F33 (d) CROSS SECTION
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
25
ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
26
ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions
G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present
bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules
G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11
G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
27
G14 (d) Woven Ply
bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
28
G14 (e) Laminated Ply
A ply made up of more than one layer
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
29
G14 (c) Soft Sail
bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
30
G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL
A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply
DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
31
ERS Section G More Sail Definitions
SEAM ATTACHMENTS
DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES
TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS
BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS
STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS
SAIL OPENING
WINDOW
BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS
32
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
33
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS
34
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
35
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
36
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
37
QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
38
Sail Reinforcement
G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
39
Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail
at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
40
G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge
G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket
G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole
G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam
Sail Reinforcement
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
41
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS
42
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
43
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
44
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
45
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
46
QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS
47
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
48
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
49
Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point
TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge
ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
50
WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail
G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply
G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams
Window Ply Area
Window Area
Window Area and Window Ply Area
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
51
ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment
bull A1 CLASS RULES
Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)
bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78
bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G
bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20
bull Skin Friction see RRS 53
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
52
ERS Section B While Racing
B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT
B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark
B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
53
ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark
B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
54
ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set
B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane
ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS
RULES
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
55
H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
56
H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at
the side relevant for the measurement
bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar
bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed
H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
57
H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail
For measurement the sail shall
a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe
otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened
oute) have just sufficient tension applied to
remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken
f) have only one measurement taken at a time and
g) be weighed with all attachments
Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring
H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and
adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent
batten pocketbull at an attachment
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
58
Tools amp Equipment
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)
Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares
Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)
59
Basic Toolkit
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
60
Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
61
Digital Cameras good macro lens
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
62
Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels
Measurement forms
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
63
Event Limitation Stamps or Labels
Event inspection forms
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
64
You need tools and special knowledge to inspect
bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules
bull Weight of equipment andor crew
bull Compliance with AppG RRS
bull Compliance with Reg20
bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
65
Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for
inspection
bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo
bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules
bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves
bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
66
Sail inspection on tables
bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and
spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers
of sails (no folding necessary)
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
67
SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
68
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
69
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
70
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
71
ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules
REMEMBER If in doubthellip
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session
72
Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing
Sails and Spars Practical Session